User manual

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsOtherEX-FR100L

.ﺍﺬﻫ

CASIO

ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟ ﻙءﺍﺮﺷ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻙﺮﻜﺸﻧ

•.ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻲﻓ ﺓﺩﺭﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﻖﻘﺤﺗ

•.

ﻼﺒﻘﺘﺴﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻦﻣﺁ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ

• ﻰﻠﻋ ﻲﻤﺳﺮﻟﺍ

EXILIM

ﻊﻗﻮﻣ ﺓﺭﺎﻳﺰﺑ ﻢﻗ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻬﺑ ﺔﺻﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻉﻼﻃﻺﻟ

http://www.exilim.com/

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (157 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫)‪(EX-FR100LCA‬‬ ‫)‪(EX-FR100LCT‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)‪(AD-C53U‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ! ‪3..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪8......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪10 .................................................................
PAGE 5
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪54 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪55 ......(Make-up)..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ..................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪55 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) .................
PAGE 6
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪87 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪) ......‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪87 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) ............‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪88 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪) .....................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪89 ......‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪) ......................
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪136 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪139 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪140 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪142 ................................................................. ...‬‬ ‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪142 .........................................
PAGE 8
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
PAGE 10
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 11
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(61‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(58 ،51‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(101‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :100-0023 :‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪.“100CASIO‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ Make-up‬ﻓﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻫﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 44‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 14
‫‪Art Shot‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 43‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 68‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 66‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 15
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 75‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺐ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ]‪ [FREE‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ]‪[FREE‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 18
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ B‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 21
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(134‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 22
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.134‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪.(2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫)ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(134‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 25
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪-‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ”ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ“ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 28
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 29
‫”‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(63‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ( ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “‬ ‫”‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫“‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫)ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٧ ،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪17/7/10 3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪10/7/17 3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪7/10/17 3‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫”‪ “am (pm)”/“24h‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫”‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[p‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪.[CARD‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪.
PAGE 33
‫‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(41‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ( ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪﻫﻤﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫– )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪) +‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 36
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(54‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.64‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(63‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ CS) “Õ‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ )‪(Art Shot‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ Make-up‬ﻓﻦ(‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )‪ Make-up‬ﻓﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪Make-up HDR‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ HDR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺪﻫﺶ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﺯ )ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺸﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺸﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻟﺮﻛﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ 15 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 30 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪:t³‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ³‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺑﺪء“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﻮﺩﺓ(‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻭ ًﻳﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.4X‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ ،“+‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”–“‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫)‪FHD(30p‬‬ ‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫”)‪ “FHD(30p‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “STD‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”)‪ “FHD(30p‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “STD‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (55‬ﻗﻴﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ”‪ “AF‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ ،“PF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫”ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫‪Make-up‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬ ‫”ﺳﻤﺮﺍء ‪ “6+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬ ‫”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪“6+‬‬ ‫”‪) 12+‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(“‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ Make-up‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪Art Shot ،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ AF :‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ AF :‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )‪ (AE‬ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪12M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٠٠٠x٤٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪5M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٩٢٠x٢٥٦٠‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.51‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (EV‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﻏﺎﺋﻤﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ISO 3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫‪ISO64‬‬ ‫‪ISO100‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ISO200‬‬ ‫‪ISO400‬‬ ‫‪ISO800‬‬ ‫‪ISO1600‬‬ ‫‪ISO3200‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.
PAGE 61
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﻟﻴﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 37‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻢ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻜﻌﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ُﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ )ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (70‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ”ﺇﻟﻐﺎء“ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ”‪“0‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ FHD(30p‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ )ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (70‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ”‪“0‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٩٩٩٩‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 71
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﻢ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺡ ُﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 72
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ FHD(30p‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ .٩:١٦‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻻ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 76
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(86‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 77
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.com/manual/‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ ،EXILIM Connect (PDF‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ . Adobe Reader‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.PDF‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫”‬ ‫“‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ™ ‪ Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth low energy technology‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Android‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١٠‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth low energy technology‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺑﺪء“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 83
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(77‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 85
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(77‬‬ ‫”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ“‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻣﺜﺒ ًﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 87
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ .Bluetooth low energy technology‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(89‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬ ‫” “ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 3M‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 3M‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ(‬ ‫” “ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪(WLAN‬‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(92‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 92
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ(‬ ‫” “ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(98 ،95‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(100 ،97‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 96
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 10‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”‪ .“Explorer‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8.1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 97
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺥ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.102‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ OS X 10.5‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪QuickTime Player‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.24‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 100
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.102‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 101
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(102‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 102
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.(DCF) Design Rule for Camera File System‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﺮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .DCIM‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.54‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،١+‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﺴﺮﺍً‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٧ ،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪17/7/10‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫‪10/7/17‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪7/10/17‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪Language 3‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 111
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.
PAGE 112
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [RESET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 113
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺯﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .
PAGE 114
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [RESET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 115
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 116
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫– ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ‬ ‫– ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﻓﺄﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 117
‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ*‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺘﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪٢*.MIL-Standard 810F Method 516.
PAGE 118
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [CARD‬ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [USB‬ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [CARD‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺪﺍﻙ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺘﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻐﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺬﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [CARD‬ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻏﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻋﺬﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺩﻟﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎء ﻋﺬﺏ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.
PAGE 120
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 121
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫– ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫– ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﺵ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 123
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ™ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ® ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ microSDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Windows 8.1‬ﻭ‪ Windows 10‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻭ‪ QuickTime‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.
PAGE 125
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬. ً ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ‬ .‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ OpenVG 1.1 Reference Implementation Copyright (c) 2007 The Khronos Group Inc.
PAGE 126
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity.
PAGE 127
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. 2. Grant of Copyright License.
PAGE 128
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
PAGE 129
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License.
PAGE 130
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
PAGE 131
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner.
PAGE 132
attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and (d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed a
PAGE 133
8. Limitation of Liability.
PAGE 134
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 136
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺠﺮﺡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ‪ Phillips‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 137
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﻣّﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﻣّﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 138
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣١‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(108‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺑﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻚ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(108‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 141
‫‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 142
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(20‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ (١‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٣‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫”ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(104‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺖ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(144‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 148
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ*‪microSD ٢‬‬ ‫‪(٣٠٠٠x٤٠٠٠) 12M‬‬ ‫‪ ٤٫١٣‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٢٢٨٦‬‬ ‫‪(١٩٢٠x٢٥٦٠) 5M‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٩٩‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪١٤‬‬ ‫‪٤٢٨٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ*‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣ
PAGE 150
‫*‪ ١‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٩٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫*‪ ٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.(SanDisk Corporation‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ ٣‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ .FHD(30p‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ Ultra‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(53 ،31‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 151
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،(٢٫٣‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ H.
PAGE 152
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،ISO 800 ،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،ISO 64 ،‬‬ ‫‪ISO 3200 ،ISO 1600‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪:Bluetooth‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth® 2.1+EDR‬‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪٢‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth® 4.0‬‬ ‫‪:Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‪IEEE 802.
PAGE 153
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 154
‫‪ .
PAGE 155
ً ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬ Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: Casio Europe GmbH Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany www.casio-europe.com To comply with the relevant European RF exposure compliance requirements, this EX-FR100LCA, EX-FR100LCT must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with other transmitter.
PAGE 156
.‫ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬FCC ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ GUIDELINES LAID DOWN BY FCC RULES FOR USE OF THIS UNIT IN THE U.S.A. (not applicable to other areas). NOTICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
PAGE 157
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.